User's Guide

ManualsBrandsCasio ManualsOtherEX-TR80

ﺔﻴﻤﻗﺭ ﺍﺮﻴﻣﺎﻛ

ﻡﺪﺨﺘﺴﻤﻟﺍ ﻞﻴﻟﺩ

.ﺍﺬﻫ CASIO ﺞﺘﻨﻤﻟ ﻙءﺍﺮﺷ ﻰﻠﻋ ﻙﺮﻜﺸﻧ

•.ﻡﺪﺨﺘﺴﻤﻟﺍ ﻞﻴﻟﺩ ﻲﻓ ﺓﺩﺭﺍﻮﻟﺍ ﺕﺎﻃﺎﻴﺘﺣﻻﺍ ﺓءﺍﺮﻗ ﻦﻣ ﺍﺮﻴﻣﺎﻜﻟﺍ ﻡﺍﺪﺨﺘﺳﺍ ﻞﺒﻗ ﻖﻘﺤﺗ

•.

ﻼﺒﻘﺘﺴﻣ ﻪﻴﻟﺇ ﻉﻮﺟﺮﻠﻟ ﻦﻣﺁ ﻥﺎﻜﻣ ﻲﻓ ﻡﺪﺨﺘﺴﻤﻟﺍ ﻞﻴﻟﺪﺑ ﻆﻔﺘﺣﺍ

• ﻰﻠﻋ ﻲﻤﺳﺮﻟﺍ EXILIM ﻊﻗﻮﻣ ﺓﺭﺎﻳﺰﺑ ﻢﻗ ،ﺞﺘﻨﻤﻟﺍ ﺍﺬﻬﺑ ﺔﺻﺎﺨﻟﺍ ﺕﺎﻣﻮﻠﻌﻤﻟﺍ ﺙﺪﺣﺃ ﻰﻠﻋ ﻉﻼﻃﻺﻟ

http://www.exilim.com/

Summary of content (159 pages)

PAGE 1
‫‪AR‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﻜﺮﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﺍءﻙ ﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ‪ CASIO‬ﻫﺬﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻼ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫• ﻟﻺﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪ EXILIM‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻤﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪http://www.exilim.
PAGE 2
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻓﺮﺍﻍ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻋﺒﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺃﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪USB-‬‬ ‫)‪(AD-C53U‬‬ ‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ*‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫* ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻢ ﺑﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 3
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ!‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻛﺘﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺖ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻛﺘﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﺎ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻻﺣﻈﺖ ﺃﻱ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺗﺴﺎﺅﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺎﻃﺊ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳُﺤﻈﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﺍء ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺠﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻱ‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻛﺘﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺼﺮﻳﺢ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪ CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.
PAGE 4
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪2.....................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ! ‪3..........................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ‪8......................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ‪9...................................................................
PAGE 5
‫❚❙ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪50‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪50 ...............................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ ‪) .....................................................‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻮﺭﻱ(‪53 .....‬‬ ‫❚ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪53 ....................................................................................‬‬ ‫❚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪54 ..............................................................................................
PAGE 6
‫❚❙ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫)ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬ ‫‪78‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪78 .....................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻔﻀﻼﺗﻚ‪) ...........................‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ(‪78 ......‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪) ...............................................‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ(‪79 ......‬‬ ‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ‪) ......................................................................‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ(‪80 ......‬‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪) ....
PAGE 7
‫)ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ‪113‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪) ................................................................‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ(‪...‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪) ................................................................‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ(‪...‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪).............................................................................‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‪...‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ‪.................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪) ...........................
PAGE 8
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﺡ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ‪.
PAGE 9
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻹﻋﻼﻣﻚ ﺩﻭﻣﺎً ﺑﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻣﻮﺍﺿﻊ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻌﻠﻴﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 10
‫‪ .‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪1 2 34‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪(65 ،50‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺭﻣﺰ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(51‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(51‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪/‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪(153 ،51‬‬ ‫‪ “ ” 5‬ﺭﻣﺰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪(51 ،33‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 11
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻭﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(111‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :100-0023 :‬ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٢٣‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ”‪.“100CASIO‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 12
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ CASIO‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ CASIO‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺑﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪/‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﺭﺍﺋﻌﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪ Make-up‬ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﺟﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪ Make-up‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ 63 ،41‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 13
‫ﻓﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻭﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺇﺛﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻼﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 45‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻮﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ً‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻗﺼﻴﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻭﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 53‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ‪ EXILIM‬ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.
PAGE 14
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻭﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺘﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻊ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺸﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺑﺼﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .
PAGE 15
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٢٧٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﺬﺭ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ٢٧٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺿﻊ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺮﺋﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻚ‪ .
PAGE 16
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻼﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻛﺲ ﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ‪ ٩٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺍﻣﺴﻜﻪ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻘﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻭﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻭﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 17
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺤﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻭﻟﻌﺪﺓ ﻟﺤﻈﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﺭﺍ ﻛﻲ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﻦ ً‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪LED‬‬ ‫ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻘﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺼﻢ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ( ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻩ ﺣﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﺼﻤﻚ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺄﺭﺟﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ‪.
PAGE 18
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺳﺤﺒﻪ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻛﺲ ﻟﻼﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻤﺮﺭ ﻓﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻴﻪ‪.
PAGE 19
‫ً‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻣﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺳﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻴﻠﺘﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ”ﻓﺘﺢ ﻭﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (14‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪USB‬‬ ‫• ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻦ‪(.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 20
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.143‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺼﺒﺢ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺳﺎﺧ ًﻨﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻄﻞ‪.
PAGE 21
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻛﺲ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ u‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻭﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻛﺲ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻀﻲء ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻀﻲء ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪.
PAGE 22
‫‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ )‪.(2 ،1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫)ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬ ‫‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ‬ ‫]‪[USB‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ‬ ‫‪USB‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫)ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ )‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﻟﻠﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.
PAGE 23
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﺑﺎﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪،‬‬ ‫)ﻳﻀﻲء‪/‬ﻳﻮﻣﺾ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ(‬ ‫ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺑﺎﻷﺣﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻐﺮﺍﻕ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(143‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﻳﻀﻲء‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻷﺧﻀﺮ(‬ ‫ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫• ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.
PAGE 24
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﻔﺎﺩ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻴﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.
PAGE 25
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﺸﻞ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺧﺎﻃﺌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻦ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺸﺮﺍء ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ(“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .
PAGE 26
‫‪ .٨‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ“‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ“ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٧‬ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﺘﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ً‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻘﺎ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 31‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٩‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‪.“OK‬‬ ‫‪ .١٠‬ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻘﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‪.“OK‬‬ ‫• ﺳﺘﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻘﻴﺪ ً‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻘﺎ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 49‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 27
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺷﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻏﺎﻟﺒًﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺮﺍء ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺎً ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺳﻌﺎﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 28
‫ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(14‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ]‪.[CARD‬‬ ‫ﻏﻄﺎء‬ ‫]‪[CARD‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻭﺭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻏﻼﻕ ﻏﻄﺎء ]‪.
PAGE 29
‫‪ .‬ﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺮﺭﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ً‬ ‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪ .‬ﺍﺟﺬﺏ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (8‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪ .
PAGE 30
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫]‪) [p‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(22‬‬ ‫]‪) [p‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫“ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.
PAGE 31
‫ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﺘﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻊ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﻭﺃﻏﺮﺍﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(40‬ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻭﺿﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ( ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪.
PAGE 32
‫‪ .٤‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ“ ﺃﻭ ”ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ“ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺎﻣﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻛﺘﺸﺎﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(46‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ‪.
PAGE 33
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺗﺎ ﻭﺳﻴﻀﻲء‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘُﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‬ ‫ﺿﻐﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻧﻐﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻧﻐﻤﺔ )ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪(.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪ .
PAGE 34
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(62‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 64‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪...‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺃﺣﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫)ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻗﺮﻳﺐ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ(‪ .‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 35
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.71‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫“ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ “2‬ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(69‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(113‬‬ ‫• ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﻴﻦ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 36
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻌﺪ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﺃﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ )ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ” “‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ“‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ” “‪.
PAGE 37
‫‪ .‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ” “‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ“‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”ﺣﺬﻑ“‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.“.
PAGE 38
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﺴﻄﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻴﺪﻙ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻂء ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(40‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻈﻲ ﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﻧﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 39
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫“ )ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ‬ ‫]‪) [p‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫“ )ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ‪.
PAGE 40
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫“ )ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 41
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺭﺍﺋﻌﺔ )‪(Make-up‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪ Make-up‬ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺑﺸﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﻇﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﺟﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫“ )ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ” “ )‪.(Make-up‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.Make-up‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ” “ )‪ (Make-up‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٥‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﺒﻄﻪ‪.
PAGE 42
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ )‪(Art Shot‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺷﻴﻮﻋﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺇﺛﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻬﺪ‬ ‫‪HDR‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪) HDR‬ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (60‬ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻳﺴﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﻠﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻏﺎﻣﺾ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻘﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻔﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﻖ‪.
PAGE 43
‫‪ .٥‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ”‪.“ART‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫”ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﻐﺮ“‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻬﺪ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﻢ‬ ‫‪HDR‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻳﺴﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺮﺍﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻔﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﻥ ﻓﺎﺗﺢ‬ ‫ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺭﺯ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬ ‫‪ .٦‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‪.
PAGE 44
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﺔ )ﻧﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﺗﺨﺎﺫ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫“ )ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫“ )ﻧﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 45
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺳﻴﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻤﻴﺰﺓ )ﻓﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻔﻲ(‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ‪) make-up‬ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ ،(41، 49‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﻭﺗﻠﻄﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﺬﻫﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ :‬ﺃﻧﻴﻖ‪ ،‬ﺿﺒﺎﺑﻲ‪ ،‬ﺧﻴﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺑﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺛﻢ ﻟﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫“‬ ‫)ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ”‬ ‫“‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻓﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻔﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‪.“OK‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 46
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺄﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‪ :‬ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ HD‬ﻭﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﻭﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﻭﻭﻡ‬ ‫‪HD‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻗﺪﺭﺍﺕ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻗﺺ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻮﻳﻪ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﻭﻭﻡ‬ ‫‪SR‬‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 47
‫‪ .‬ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‬ ‫• ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(64‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﻊ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ‬ ‫‪12M‬‬ ‫‪1.5X‬‬ ‫‪4.0X‬‬ ‫‪3M‬‬ ‫‪2.9X‬‬ ‫‪7.8X‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ )ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻔﻲ(‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻔﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 48
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪) LED‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ(‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪ LED‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪ LED‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﺖ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪.LED‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪ LED‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻈﻠﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪ LED‬ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻀﻲء ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪LED‬‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ‪.
PAGE 49
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ” “ )‪ (Make-up‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻭﺑﺸﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ Make-up‬ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ‬ ‫– ‪Make-up‬‬ ‫– ﻧﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫– ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ‪ BEST SHOT‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ ﻭﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﺖ ‪ ،HS‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ‬ ‫– ﻓﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻔﻲ‬ ‫– ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻮﺭﻱ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫”‬ ‫“‬ ‫)‪(Make-up‬‬ ‫“ )‪ (Make-up‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﺗﻠﻄﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ“‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 50
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫– ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ‬ ‫– ‪Make-up‬‬ ‫– ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ‪ BEST SHOT‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ ‪ ،HS‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ ﻭﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﺖ ‪ ،HS‬ﻃﻌﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺃﻇﺎﻓﺮ‬ ‫– ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻮﺭﻱ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(53‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫“ )ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‪.“MENU‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻌﺜﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ”ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ“‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 51
‫‪.٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫“ )ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫”‪ “Full HD‬ﺃﻭ ”‪ “HD‬ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻟﻤﺲ ”‪ “o‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻭﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻭ”‪ .“R‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‪ “o‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(46‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .
PAGE 52
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻗﻀﺎء ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺩﺍﻓﺌﺔ ً‬ ‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻟﻤﺴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻄﻞ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺒﻌﺎﺙ ﺍﻟﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ Full HD‬ﻭ‪.HD‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻛﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺬﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺣﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺦ‪.
PAGE 53
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ )ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻮﺭﻱ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ً‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻗﺼﻴﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻭﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫“ )ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ( ﺛﻢ ﻟﻤﺲ ”‪.“MENU‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺴﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻌﺜﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ”ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻮﺭﻱ“‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ”ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ“ ﻭ”ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ“‪.
PAGE 54
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫“ )ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫“ )ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻮﺭﻱ(‪.‬‬ ‫“ )ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ( ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫“ )ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻧﻘﻀﺎء ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻃﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻟﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ“‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ” “ )ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ً‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻟﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 55
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ً‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪ LED‬ﻭﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺧﻤﺲ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ً‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻧﻔﺬﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻠﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‪.
PAGE 56
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪BEST SHOT‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ‪ BEST SHOT‬ﻟﻚ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ”ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ“ ﻛﻌﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺗﺎﻟﻔﺔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ‬ ‫ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪BEST SHOT‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫“ )ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 57
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ )ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ(‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻣﺘﻰ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﻔﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﻳﺢ ﺑﻴﺪﻳﻚ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻈﻬﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺴﺤﺐ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ”‬ ‫“ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ )ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 58
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ ‪(HS‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺩﻣﺠﻬﺎ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ”ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ ‪) “HS‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(56‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺪًﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.
PAGE 59
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﺖ )ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ ﻭﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﺖ ‪(HS‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ”ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ ﻭﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﺖ ‪) “HS‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(56‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺪًﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ‪ BEST SHOT‬ﻫﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪ LED‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ“‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻴﺪﻳﻚ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ‪ BEST SHOT‬ﻫﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻗﺪﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ‪.
PAGE 60
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻴﻞ )‪(HDR‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) HDR‬ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻭﺩﻣﺠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ”‪) “HDR‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(56‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‪.
PAGE 61
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫“ )ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‪.“MENU‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻌﺜﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٥‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.
PAGE 62
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ )ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ(‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ 3 REC‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ 3‬ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(11‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﺰﺍﻝ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ“ ﻛﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻤﺴﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 63
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﻈﻠﻢ )ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ 3 REC‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ 3‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤُﺜﻠﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫– ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻮﺭﻱ‬ ‫– ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ‪ BEST SHOT‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ‪ ،HDR ،‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ ‪HS‬‬ ‫– ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ‪ Art Shot‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﻢ ‪HDR‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 64
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ 3 REC‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ 3‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ(‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪12M‬‬ ‫)‪(4000x3000‬‬ ‫‪3M‬‬ ‫)‪(2048x1536‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ‬ ‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺻﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫"‪3.
PAGE 65
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ 3 REC‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ 3‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.50‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ(‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ 3 REC‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ (EV‬ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ –2.0 EV :‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+2.
PAGE 66
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ )ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ(‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ 3 REC‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ 3‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬ ‫ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻈﻞ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻮﻡ ﻏﺎﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻈﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.
PAGE 67
‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‪.“OK‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪(ISO) ISO‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ 3 REC‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪3‬‬ ‫‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻫﻲ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻈﺮﻭﻑ‬ ‫‪ISO 80‬‬ ‫‪ISO 100‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻻﻗﻂ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺃﻗﻞ‬ ‫‪ISO 200‬‬ ‫‪ISO 400‬‬ ‫‪ISO 800‬‬ ‫‪ISO 1600‬‬ ‫‪ISO 3200‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻻﻗﻂ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ )ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪(.
PAGE 68
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ )ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ 3 REC‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪.
PAGE 69
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬ ‫”ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ“ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ )ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ(‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 70
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 35‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺠﺒﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻔﻀﻼﺗﻚ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(78‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻔﻀﻼﺗﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫“ )ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ” “ ً‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺭﺯﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ” “ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯﻩ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻔﻀﻼﺗﻚ‪.
PAGE 71
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫“ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫“ )ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎً‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫“‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫“‪.
PAGE 72
‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ” “ )ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ( ﺃﻭ ” “ )ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ(‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ” “‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 73
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻗﺺ ﺟﺰء ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺼﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫“ ﻟﻺﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫“‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺼﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫¡ ﻗﺺ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻗﺺ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ¢‬ﻗﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺺ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 74
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫“ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻢ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻴﻚ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ )ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩﺓ(‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﻬﺎﻡ )?( ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻷﻱ ﺳﺒﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .
PAGE 75
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﺮﻭﻳﺠﻲ )ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﺮﻭﻳﺠﻲ(‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺩﻣﺠﻬﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ ٦‬ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ‪ ١٠‬ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ‪ ١٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫“ )ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ(‪.‬‬ ‫“ )ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﺮﻭﻳﺠﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻭﻳﺠﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 76
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﺮﻭﻳﺠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺎﻭﻟﺖ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻭﻳﺠﻴﺔ ﺑﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ ،HD‬ﻭﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ‪ .١٦:٩‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﻮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﺮﻭﻳﺠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ“ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺴﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ً‬ ‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‪ .
PAGE 77
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ )ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ(‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(89‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺠﻠﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ” “ )ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ(‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫“‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Make-up‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ make-up‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.Make-up‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ make-up‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ” “ )‪.(Make-up‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 78
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫“ )ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‪.“MENU‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.
PAGE 79
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ(‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ 3‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ )ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩﺓ(‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.
PAGE 80
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ )ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ(‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ 3‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ”‬ ‫“‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ” “‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ‪ 1‬ﻭ ‪ 2‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.
PAGE 81
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ 3‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫“‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ ٩٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫“‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻻ ﻳﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.
PAGE 82
‫ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ )ﺗﺴﻮﻳﺔ(‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ 3‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ 3‬ﺗﺴﻮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﻮﻳﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ‪ ،٣:٤‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺴﺒﺘﻲ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺗﺴﻮﻳﺘﻬﺎ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ ٣:٤‬ﺃﻭ ‪) ١:١‬ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺔ(‪.
PAGE 83
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ )ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻼ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ®‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻣﺠﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ EXILIM Connect‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 84
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(97‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 85
‫‪ .‬ﺣﻮﻝ ‪EXILIM Connect‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ‪ ،EXILIM Connect‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫)ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪EXILIM Connect‬‬ ‫‪http://www.exilim.com/manual/‬‬ ‫• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻟﺘﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ ،EXILIM Connect‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪.Adobe Reader‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ CASIO‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪.PDF‬‬ ‫• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺃﺩﻟﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ EXILIM Connect‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ‪ .
PAGE 86
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺗﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫”‬ ‫“ )ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ(‬ ‫“ )ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ” “ )ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪.
PAGE 87
‫‪ .‬ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺼﻒ ﺷﻔﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺷﻔﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺼﻒ ﺷﻔﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺷﻔﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺷﻔﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 88
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ EXILIM Connect‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻃﺮﻓﻲ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪Android‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ”‪.“Google Play‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ”‪.“EXILIM Connect‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ”‪.“EXILIM Connect‬‬ ‫‪(iOS) iPhone .‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ”‪.“App Store‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ”‪.“EXILIM Connect‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ”‪.
PAGE 89
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ‪Bluetooth low energy technology‬‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ )ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 90
‫‪ .٩‬ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻣﺎ ”ﺍﻟﻜﻞ“ ﺃﻭ ”ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺃﻭﻻً“‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬ ‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺨﻄﻂ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Bluetooth‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ‪Bluetooth low energy technology‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ )ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ SSID‬ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ”‬ ‫“ )ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 91
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻛﺄﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ(‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻋﻼﻭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻟﻼﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪) EXILIM Connect‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(85‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 92
‫‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ”‬ ‫“ )ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ“‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”ﺑﺪء“‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٥‬ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ SSID‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪LAN‬‬ ‫ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٥‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺒﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ”‪.“EXILIM Connect‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 93
‫ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻘﺘﺮﻥ )ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻴﺔ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻘﺘﺮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻣﻘﺘﺮﻥ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ ،Bluetooth‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫”‪ .“Scene Server‬ﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،Scene sever‬ﺃﻧﺖ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ Scene‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ .
PAGE 94
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﻣﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺑﺈﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ‪ ٥٠٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪Scene server‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ Scene‬ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.
PAGE 95
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ )ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ” “ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ” “ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.
PAGE 96
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ‪ .Bluetooth low energy technology‬ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ً‬ ‫ﻛﻼ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻭﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪X :‬‬ ‫– ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪V :‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ”ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ“‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 97
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ )ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﻣﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺑﺈﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ‪ ٥٠٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ”‬ ‫“ )ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ“‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ“‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 98
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ )ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻻ‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ً EXILIM Connect‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺎ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 99
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻭﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ”‬ ‫“ )ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻟﻤﺲ ” “ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ“‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻨﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.
PAGE 100
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ )ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬ ‫”‬ ‫“ )ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ( ‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ‪ 3‬ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 95‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬ ‫”‬ ‫“ )ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ( ‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪³t‬‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪t‬‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 101
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ )ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ(‬ ‫”‬ ‫“ )ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ( ‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ‪ 3‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻟﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ )ﺧﻄﻮﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ( ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.
PAGE 102
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ )ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ‪(WLAN‬‬ ‫”‬ ‫“ )ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ( ‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ‪ 3‬ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ‪WLAN‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﻥ ﺑﻬﺎ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(103‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ” “ ﺃﻭ ” “ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 103
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ )ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ(‬ ‫”‬ ‫“ )ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ( ‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ‪ 3‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪) EXILIM Connect‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(85‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻈﻞ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪.
PAGE 104
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﺩ ﻣﻊ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺘﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 105
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪...‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪(USB‬‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬ ‫• ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ )ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪.(109 ،106‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪.(110 ،108‬‬ ‫• ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺴﺒﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‪.
PAGE 106
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺑﺪﻭﺭﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‪ .
PAGE 107
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ”ﻗﺮﺹ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ“‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮًﺍ‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻛﻘﺮﺹ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮًﺍ ﻳﻤﻴﻨﺎً ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ”‪.“DCIM‬‬ ‫‪ .٦‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ”ﻧﺴﺦ“ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٧‬ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻮ ‪ :Windows 8.1 ، Windows 10‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ”ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ“‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻮ ‪ :Windows Vista ، Windows 7‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ”ﺑﺪء“ ﺛﻢ ”ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ“‪.
PAGE 108
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫• ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ً‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ً‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺖ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ”‪.
PAGE 109
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺑﺪﻭﺭﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.
PAGE 110
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮًﺍ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻀﻲء ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﻮء ﺃﺧﻀﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Macintosh‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ( ﻛﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪Mac OS‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ”‪ “DCIM‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻟﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٥‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺴﺤﺐ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﻼﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 111
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻠﻒ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻭﻣﺠﻠﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ﻓﺮﻳﺪ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(112‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ٩٩٩٩‬ﻣﻠﻒ ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺑﺄﺳﻤﺎء ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪ CIMG0001‬ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ .CIMG9999‬ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.
PAGE 112
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪.(DCF) Design Rule for Camera File System‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ‪DCF‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ .DCF‬ﻻﺣﻆ‪ ،‬ﺃﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﺣﻮﺍﻝ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﻄﻲ ‪ CASIO‬ﺃﻱ‬ ‫ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ DCF‬ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ DCF‬ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.
PAGE 113
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.61‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﺷﺎﺷﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ 3‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ 3‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪٢+‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎً ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ،١+‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻳﺴﺮﺍ‪ .
PAGE 114
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ 3‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ 3‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ“ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ 3‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ 3‬ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪.
PAGE 115
‫ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ )ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ 3‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ 3‬ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺨﺘﻢ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ ١٠ :‬ﻳﻮﻟﻴﻮ‪ ١:٢٥ ،٢٠١٧ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫‪2017/7/10‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ‬ ‫‪2017/7/10 1:25pm‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫• ﻭﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺧﺘﻤﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪.
PAGE 116
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ )ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻋﺎﻟﻤﻲ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ 3‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ 3‬ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻋﺎﻟﻤﻲ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻮﻃﻨﻚ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺎﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺭﺣﻠﺔ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ‪ ١٦٢‬ﻣﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ‪ ٣٢‬ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ“‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ”ﻣﺤﻠﻲ“‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”ﻣﺪﻳﻨﺔ“‪.
PAGE 117
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ 3‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ 3‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ )ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ” “ ﺃﻭ ” “ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺑﺪء ﻣﻦ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ ٢٠٠١‬ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ‪.٢٠٤٩‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻙ ﻟﻤﺪﻳﻨﺘﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (116‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﺧﺎﻃﺌﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﻳﻨﺘﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﺴﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﺃﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻮﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﺪﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (116‬ﺧﺎﻃﺌﺔ‪.
PAGE 118
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )‪(Language‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ 3‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪Language 3‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ“‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‪.“Language‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻌﺜﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻤﺴﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻃﺮﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗُﺒﺎﻉ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.
PAGE 119
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء )ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ 3‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ 3‬ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺘﻰ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ 3‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ 3‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.
PAGE 120
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ )ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ 3‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 146‬ﻟﻺﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ‪WLAN‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬ ‫• ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (99‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ“‪.‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 121
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫*ﺧﻄﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﻫﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻄﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻓﺎﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫*ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻭﻓﺎﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺠﺎﻫﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫*ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻭﺗﺠﺎﻫﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‪.
PAGE 122
‫*ﺧﻄﺮ‬ ‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﺧﻔﺎﻕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺳﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺯﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻬﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺸﺤﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺷﻴﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺷﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء )ﺳﻼﺳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻖ‪ ،‬ﻗﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺭﺻﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ(‪.
PAGE 123
‫*ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺪﺧﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺍﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‬ ‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﺒﻌﺚ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺧﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺍﺋﺤﺔ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺨﻄﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﻓﻮﺭﺍً ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪$‬‬ ‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫* ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺳﺘﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ٍ ١٠‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 124
‫*ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻳﺪﻳﻚ ﻣﺒﻠﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬ ‫ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ CASIO‬ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ* ﻻﻧﺴﻜﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﻓﻮﻗﻪ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺨﻄﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫* ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ‪ :‬ﻣﺎء ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﺑﺎﺕ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻮﻝ ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻟﻴﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‪.
PAGE 125
‫*ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺴﻘﻮﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺴﻘﻮﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻗﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﻓﻮﺭﺍً ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫* ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺳﺘﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ٍ ١٠‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.
PAGE 126
‫*ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻄﺎﺭ ﻣﺰﺩﺣﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﺰﺩﺣﻢ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺠﻠﺲ ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻳﺮﺗﺪﻱ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺿﺮﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﺐ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻘﻞ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴًﺎ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ( ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﺿﺮﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﺐ‪.
PAGE 127
‫*ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪USB‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺳﻮء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺨﻄﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺣﺪﻭﺙ‬ ‫ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫– ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺘﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﺤﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺁﺧﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻓﺄﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺳﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪.
PAGE 128
‫*ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺠﻨﺒﻬﺎ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻟﻨﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻘﺪﺭ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‬ ‫– ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﻌﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﺑﺨﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﻮﺕ‬ ‫– ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺎً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻓﺂﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺠﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺪﻓﺄﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 129
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 130
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻃﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﺵ ﺑﺴﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻋﻄﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻼﺣﻆ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﺤﻨﺎء ﻃﻔﻴﻒ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺰﻯ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻄﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ‪ .
PAGE 131
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ )ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪Bluetooth‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ(‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺨﻀﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻠﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺪﻳﺮ )‪ (EAR‬ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﻓﻼ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺼﺪﻳﺮﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻊ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻈﺮ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺘﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻋﺘﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺧﺺ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ .
PAGE 132
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺳﺎﺧﻨﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻄﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‬ ‫ﻳُﺤﻈﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺧﺺ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺰﻯ ﺣﻘﻮﻗﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺎﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﻖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺇﻻ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳُﺤﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺃﺧﺬ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺣﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﺭﺽ ﻭﺇﻟﻰ ﺁﺧﺮﻩ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻄﻠﻖ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .
PAGE 133
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ™ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ® ﻓﻲ ﻧﺺ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻌﺪ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ microSDXC‬ﻫﻮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.SD-3C, LLC‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ‪ Windows‬ﻭ‪ Windows Vista‬ﻭ‪ Windows 7‬ﻭ‪ Windows 8.1‬ﻭ‪ Windows 10‬ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Microsoft Corporation‬ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺩﻭﻝ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ‪ Macintosh‬ﻭ‪ Mac OS‬ﻭ‪ QuickTime‬ﻭ‪ iPhoto‬ﻭ‪ iPhone‬ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Apple Inc.
PAGE 134
‫ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‬. ً ‫ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺮﺧﺺ‬ .‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‬ OpenVG 1.1 Reference Implementation Copyright (c) 2007 The Khronos Group Inc.
PAGE 135
and distribution as defined by Sections 1 through 9 of this document. "Licensor" shall mean the copyright owner or entity authorized by the copyright owner that is granting the License. "Legal Entity" shall mean the union of the acting entity and all other entities that control, are controlled by, or are under common control with that entity.
PAGE 136
"Contributor" shall mean Licensor and any individual or Legal Entity on behalf of whom a Contribution has been received by Licensor and subsequently incorporated within the Work. 2. Grant of Copyright License.
PAGE 137
within a display generated by the Derivative Works, if and wherever such third-party notices normally appear. The contents of the NOTICE file are for informational purposes only and do not modify the License. You may add Your own attribution notices within Derivative Works that You distribute, alongside or as an addendum to the NOTICE text from the Work, provided that such additional attribution notices cannot be construed as modifying the License.
PAGE 138
9. Accepting Warranty or Additional Liability. While redistributing the Work or Derivative Works thereof, You may choose to offer, and charge a fee for, acceptance of support, warranty, indemnity, or other liability obligations and/or rights consistent with this License.
PAGE 139
See the License for the specific language governing permissions and limitations under the License. Apache License Version 2.0, January 2004 http://www.apache.org/licenses/ TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE, REPRODUCTION, AND DISTRIBUTION 1. Definitions. "License" shall mean the terms and conditions for use, reproduction, and distribution as defined by Sections 1 through 9 of this document. "Licensor" shall mean the copyright owner or entity authorized by the copyright owner that is granting the License.
PAGE 140
to that Work or Derivative Works thereof, that is intentionally submitted to Licensor for inclusion in the Work by the copyright owner or by an individual or Legal Entity authorized to submit on behalf of the copyright owner.
PAGE 141
attribution notices from the Source form of the Work, excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works; and (d) If the Work includes a "NOTICE" text file as part of its distribution, then any Derivative Works that You distribute must include a readable copy of the attribution notices contained within such NOTICE file, excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works, in at least one of the following places: within a NOTICE text file distributed a
PAGE 142
8. Limitation of Liability.
PAGE 143
‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺑﺪﺃ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪...‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺑﺪﺃ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻷﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.
PAGE 144
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎً ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٥‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣٥‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻭﻗﺘﺎً ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.
PAGE 145
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 27‬ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺑﺪﺃﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺘﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ ﻟﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(119‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳُﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺻﻄﺤﺎﺑﻚ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎً ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍً ﻋﻦ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﺘﺒﻚ‪.
PAGE 146
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻌﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(120‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﺔ )–( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻻ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ً ،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 147
‫‪ .‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻋﺎﻟﻤﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪Language‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪/‬‬ ‫ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪/‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪/ 3 :‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/ 3 :‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪3 :‬‬ ‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 148
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺴﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺮﺍﻡ‪...‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (١‬ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (٢‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻔﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(19‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪ CASIO‬ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (١‬ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺼﻤﻤﺔ ﻟﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺧﻤﺲ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.
PAGE 149
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪ LED‬ﻻ ﻳﻀﻲء‪ (١ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻓﻘﺪﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻨﻬﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(19‬‬ ‫‪ (٢‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪ LED‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﺘﻰ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ‪ BEST SHOT‬ﻭﺭﺳﻢ ‪ .HDR‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺁﺧﺮ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(40‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺤﻦ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(19‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.
PAGE 150
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﻃﺊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻟﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (١‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﻤﻜ ًﻨﺎ ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬ ‫‪ (٢‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺘﺴﺨﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(130‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (٣‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻛﺎﻥ ً‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .
PAGE 151
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻨﻲ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﻢ ﻗﻄﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (١‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺎ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﺣﺪﻫﻤﺎ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (٢‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(89‬‬ ‫‪ (٣‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﻢ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﻓﺮﻥ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻭﻳﻒ ﻗﺮﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ .
PAGE 152
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺠﻴﺐ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ“ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ“ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺠﻴﺐ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.
PAGE 153
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﻣﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(119‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.
PAGE 154
‫*‪٣‬‬ ‫*‪٤‬‬ ‫*‪٥‬‬ ‫*‪٦‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻪ ﺃﻗﺼﺮ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ microSD‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ .Full HD‬ﻣﺘﻰ ﺃﻣﻜﻦ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ Ultra‬ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪.(52 ،27‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ .
PAGE 155
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ Exif) JPEG‬ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪2.3‬؛ ‪ DCF 2.0‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ؛ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪(DPOF‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ ،MOV‬ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ‪) IMA-ADPCM ،H.264/AVC‬ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‬ ‫ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺪﻣﺠﺔ )ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ٤٩٫٩ :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ*(‬ ‫‪microSD/microSDHC/microSDXC‬‬ ‫* ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫‪(١٥٣٦x٢٠٤٨) 3M ،(٣٠٠٠x٤٠٠٠) 12M‬‬ ‫‪*(١٥٣٦x١٥٣٦) 2M ،*(٢٩٧٦x٢٩٧٦) 8M‬‬ ‫* ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺔ‪.
PAGE 156
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻏﺎﺋﻢ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻇﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ‬ ‫ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﺠﺴﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫)ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪،ISO 800 ،ISO 400 ،ISO 200 ،ISO 100 ،ISO 80 ،‬‬ ‫‪ISO 3200 ،ISO 1600‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ :‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬ ‫‪LED‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪:Bluetooth‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ Bluetooth® :‬ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪٤٫٠.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ‪IEEE 802.
PAGE 157
‫ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ )‪ ٢٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ( ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﻤﻮﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻠﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 158
‫‪ .
PAGE 159
CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.